Top Banner
NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
57
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

NEC PASOLINK NEOCOMMISSIONING

GUIDE

PNMT Communication Interfaces

CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment is possiblebull via the LCT port of the equipment

LCT Port Interface

bull The LCT port is located on the front of the equipment

PNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must

be connected using a standard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computer and the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control

[CTRL] Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parity

Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO

bull PASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull bull 1+0 (Terminal)bull bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull bull 2-WAY 1

1+1 (HOT STAND-BY) 1+1 (TWIN PATH) 2-WAY1 ONLY PDH SUPPORTS 2-WAY

1+0 (Terminal)

Hardware Requirements

Recommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker

Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application software

The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options lustrates the commands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also can display an operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functions can be executed in the NE-specific menu bar

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 2: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

PNMT Communication Interfaces

CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment is possiblebull via the LCT port of the equipment

LCT Port Interface

bull The LCT port is located on the front of the equipment

PNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must

be connected using a standard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computer and the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control

[CTRL] Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parity

Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO

bull PASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull bull 1+0 (Terminal)bull bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull bull 2-WAY 1

1+1 (HOT STAND-BY) 1+1 (TWIN PATH) 2-WAY1 ONLY PDH SUPPORTS 2-WAY

1+0 (Terminal)

Hardware Requirements

Recommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker

Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application software

The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options lustrates the commands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also can display an operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functions can be executed in the NE-specific menu bar

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 3: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

LCT Port Interface

bull The LCT port is located on the front of the equipment

PNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must

be connected using a standard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computer and the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control

[CTRL] Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parity

Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO

bull PASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull bull 1+0 (Terminal)bull bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull bull 2-WAY 1

1+1 (HOT STAND-BY) 1+1 (TWIN PATH) 2-WAY1 ONLY PDH SUPPORTS 2-WAY

1+0 (Terminal)

Hardware Requirements

Recommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker

Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application software

The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options lustrates the commands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also can display an operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functions can be executed in the NE-specific menu bar

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 4: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

PNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must

be connected using a standard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computer and the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control

[CTRL] Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parity

Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO

bull PASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull bull 1+0 (Terminal)bull bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull bull 2-WAY 1

1+1 (HOT STAND-BY) 1+1 (TWIN PATH) 2-WAY1 ONLY PDH SUPPORTS 2-WAY

1+0 (Terminal)

Hardware Requirements

Recommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker

Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application software

The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options lustrates the commands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also can display an operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functions can be executed in the NE-specific menu bar

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 5: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO

bull PASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull bull 1+0 (Terminal)bull bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull bull 2-WAY 1

1+1 (HOT STAND-BY) 1+1 (TWIN PATH) 2-WAY1 ONLY PDH SUPPORTS 2-WAY

1+0 (Terminal)

Hardware Requirements

Recommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker

Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application software

The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options lustrates the commands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also can display an operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functions can be executed in the NE-specific menu bar

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 6: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

1+1 (HOT STAND-BY) 1+1 (TWIN PATH) 2-WAY1 ONLY PDH SUPPORTS 2-WAY

1+0 (Terminal)

Hardware Requirements

Recommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker

Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application software

The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options lustrates the commands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also can display an operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functions can be executed in the NE-specific menu bar

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 7: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Hardware Requirements

Recommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker

Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application software

The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options lustrates the commands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also can display an operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functions can be executed in the NE-specific menu bar

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 8: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application software

The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options lustrates the commands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also can display an operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functions can be executed in the NE-specific menu bar

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 9: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options lustrates the commands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also can display an operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functions can be executed in the NE-specific menu bar

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 10: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

bull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pink status value White disabled Gray maintenance Yellow

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 11: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Block DiagramNE-Specific Menu Bar

DataWindow

Login User

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 12: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Text Box

Radio Button Command Button

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 13: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT Window

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 14: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Launching the PNMT Application

To start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start then Programs then Pnmtj then Pnmt then continue to the login window

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 15: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

NOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of your computer once PNMT has started

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 16: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in the window depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may not be carried out The highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and network management systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login window appears

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 17: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for the respective user4 Click the [Login] button If you wish to exit the program click [Exit]

Login User

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 18: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Shutting Down the PNMT To close the PNMT application

1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the application

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 19: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayed To search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System then Connect in menu bar of PNMT main window

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 20: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Initially only the current NE physically connected to the PNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the Network Element List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List then Search for Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements in the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menu bar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both the selected and its opposite Network Element will be displayed

NOTE Simultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to the same NE is possible1 Local connection PNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connection PNMT is connected to opposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connection PNMT is connected to the NE via remote access

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 21: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme can also be set using this function To set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System then Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 22: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting

RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool bar

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 23: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searching the connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the network

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 24: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

PNMT main window (1+1 configuration)

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 25: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The overall status window provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the NE

Overall Status Window

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 26: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

The Overall status window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed here The following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or Manual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 [OPTICAL] interface)

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 27: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODUconfiguration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 28: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Overview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 29: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window only displays current settings and no control functions are available here To set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the modem Select the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 30: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Overview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modem

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 31: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 32: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Overview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interface

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 33: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable here To set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and Provisioning To view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 34: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main window

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 35: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 36: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 37: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finished

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 38: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finished

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 39: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Control (CTRL) Tab Various control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 40: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mounted (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network Setting

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 41: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window

NOTE To synchronize the Date and Time field values with those of the PNMT computer click the Display PC Time box (placing a checkmark in it)

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 42: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 43: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address of the target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 44: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file is downloaded to the correct Control module An incorrect configuration file may lead to Control module or network malfunctionfailure 4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation

WARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC

5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finished

WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded the configuration file before executing Update Otherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control module malfunctionfailure

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 45: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file

7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of the configuration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function Downloading a new Program file to the Control Module

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 46: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

NOTE When updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NE communication will be lost when the Control module reinitializes to the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically be restored after the Control module is reset

8 Click the [Close] button when doneDownloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disrupt communication This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module

1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRL window

2 Select the module select button of CTRL If you tick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module will be reset automatically after program file download is completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are not necessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file (out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse] to locate the file

WARNINGMake sure that the correct program file is downloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 47: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The message window will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending on the program file size6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the new program file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [OK] button to complete the switch to the new program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutes but will be automatically restored shortly

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 48: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished

ATPC Manual Control Use when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF) ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the new setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 49: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ON This should be OFF in normal operation To change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedIF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loop Back] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finished

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 50: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selected To select Sub Band1 Click [Sub Band] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedAntenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 51: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 52: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO

Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)- This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished

  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57
Page 53: 76708310-NEC-PASOLINK-NEO
  • NEC PASOLINK NEO COMMISSIONING GUIDE
  • PNMT Communication Interfaces
  • LCT Port Interface
  • Slide 4
  • PNMT ndash IDU Connection
  • Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO
  • Hardware Requirements
  • Software Requirements
  • Slide 10
  • Slide 11
  • Slide 12
  • Slide 13
  • Slide 14
  • Launching the PNMT Application
  • Slide 16
  • Slide 17
  • Slide 18
  • Slide 19
  • Slide 20
  • Slide 21
  • Slide 22
  • Slide 23
  • Slide 24
  • Slide 25
  • Slide 26
  • Slide 27
  • Slide 28
  • Slide 29
  • Slide 30
  • Slide 31
  • Slide 32
  • Slide 33
  • Slide 34
  • Slide 35
  • Slide 36
  • Slide 37
  • Slide 38
  • Slide 39
  • Slide 40
  • Slide 41
  • Slide 42
  • Slide 43
  • Slide 44
  • Slide 45
  • Slide 46
  • Slide 47
  • Slide 48
  • Slide 49
  • Slide 50
  • Slide 51
  • Slide 52
  • Slide 53
  • Slide 54
  • Slide 55
  • Slide 56
  • Slide 57